You are on page 1of 439

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name


Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of


features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your


perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 3

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

10

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Vehicle Identification Number

How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

.............. 7

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
This Owners Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.

INTRODUCTION 5

belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more


each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owners Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided


is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat

Consult the following table for a description of the


symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owners Manual:

6 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION 7

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS


This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN label.

8 INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE


2

CONTENTS
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Vehicle Security Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Integrated Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Sentry Key Immobilizer System

. . . . . . . . . . . 15

Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . 22

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Express Down Window Feature If


Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Programming Additional RKE Transmitters . . . 23
RKE Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . 23
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Starting System If Equipped . . . . . . . 25
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Passive Entry System If Equipped . . . . . . . 29

To Place An RKE Transmitter In The Vehicle


For Safekeeping Vehicles Equipped With
Keyless Go Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Liftgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . 38

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 42

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped . . . . 42

Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 69

Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System


(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The


Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 46

Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The


Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46


Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS


Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert
the double-sided key into the ignition switch with either
side up.

released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position.

Keyless Go Feature
This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go
feature, for more information, refer to Keyless Go If
Equipped under Starting Procedure in Section 5 of
this manual.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)


1
2
3
4

LOCK
ACC (ACCESSORY)
ON
START

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Integrated Ignition Key


The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the RKE
transmitter.

The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The
valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep
the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter, slide
the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out
with your other hand.

Three-Button FOBIK (FOB with Integrated Key)

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into


the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition key to the
LOCK position, and remove the key.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
If you try to remove the key before you place the shift
lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in
the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped, but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time for this feature is programmable. For details,
refer to Key Off Power Delay, under Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) under


Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
Section 4 of this manual.

WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the drivers door with the integrated ignition
key in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCK
or ACC position.
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the
engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and
loss of security protection.
Exxon/Mobil Speedpass, additional RKE transmitters, or any other transponder-equipped components
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the RKE
transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell
phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause
interference with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a


vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE transmitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electronics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been
programmed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer


system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following procedure:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position and remove the second key.

3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch


and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound
and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for three seconds, and then turn off.
The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with integrated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
This Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors, liftgate, liftgate flipper glass, and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visible signals. The
horn, headlights, and tail lights will sound/flash repeatedly for three minutes. If disturbance is still present
(drivers door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after
three minutes, the headlights and tail lights will flash for
an additional 15 minutes.

NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after three
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
To Set the Alarm
The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate, or
when you use the power door lock switch while the door
is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the
Vehicle Security Light (located in the instrument cluster)
will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the
system is arming. During this 16 second arming period,

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming. If


the system successfully arms, the Vehicle Security Light
will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.

system by unlocking the drivers door with the key and


then locking it. The door will be locked but the Vehicle
Security Alarm will not arm.

To Disarm the System


To disarm the system, you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition
key to the ON position. If something has triggered the
system in your absence, the horn will sound three times
when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door.
They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors
are closed then fade to off.

The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect


your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter, once
the system is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the
door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to
disarm the system. You may also accidentally disarm the

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY


This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
about 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld RKE radio transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need not be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.

The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key (FOBIK)


into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work. Driving the vehicle over
5 mph disables all transmitter buttons, for all Fobs, until
the ignition is turned back to Off Lock.

To Unlock the Doors


Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the drivers door, or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the drivers door, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:

Three-Button FOBIK

For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle


Information Center (EVIC), refer to Remote Key
Unlock under Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features) under Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this
manual.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock


This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to Flash Lamps with
Lock under Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features) under Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this
manual.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to Headlamp Off Delay under

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)


under Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
Section 4 of this manual.
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to Sound Horn with
Lock, under Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features) under Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this
manual.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass


Press the FLIPPER GLASS/TRUNK RELEASE button
two times (the second press within 5 seconds of the first
press) to open liftgate flipper glass

WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Express Down Window Feature If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.

Using the Panic Alarm


To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

You may need to be less than 67 ft (20 m) from the


vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises
emitted by the system.

1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of


the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot
and gently pry open the access door.

Programming Additional RKE Transmitters


Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
RKE Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.

Battery Replacement
1 Battery Access Door

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the


new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.

General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery


opening and snap into place.

This device may not cause harmful interference.

If Equipped With Passive Entry


1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.

This device must accept any interference received,


including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails to
operate from a normal distance, check for these two
conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station


tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED


This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a
targeted range of 328 ft (100 m).

Battery at an acceptable charge level, and

How to Use Remote Start


All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Shift lever in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off

Ignition key removed from ignition switch


RKE PANIC button not pressed.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle
is in the Remote Start mode.

START/STOP button is not present, insert the key into


the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON
position.

The engine can be started two consecutive times (two


15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START/
STOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be
cycled to the ON position) before you can repeat the
start sequence for a third cycle.

NOTE:
For the vehicle not equipped with Keyless Go feature,
the ignition switch must be in the ON position in order
to drive the vehicle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the


Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
simply press and release the START/STOP button. If the

For the vehicle not equipped with Keyless Go feature,


the message Insert Key/Turn To On will display in
the EVIC until you insert the key. Once inserted, the
message Turn To On will display in the EVIC until
you turn the key to On. Refer to Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this
manual.
For the vehicle equipped with Keyless Go feature, the
message Push Button/Insert Key will display in the
EVIC until you push the START Button.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start


Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave unattended children in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks


The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the
ignition switch, and the drivers door is open, the doors
will not lock.
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
until you pull up the lock plungers.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is selected, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph
(24 km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever
a door is opened.

Power Door Lock Switch

If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door


will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.

This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.


Refer to Auto Door Locks under CustomerProgrammable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this manual or see
your authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

Automatic Unlock on Exit Feature Only


Available if Auto Lock is Enabled
This feature will unlock all the doors when the drivers
door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Refer to Auto Unlock on Exit under
Customer-Programmable Features under Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this
manual or see your authorized dealer.
Passive Entry System If Equipped
The Passive Entry system allows you to unlock the
vehicles door(s) without using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter unlock button, or the unlock button
located on the vehicles interior door panel. To use this
feature you must have a valid RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(0.9 m) of the door handle you desire to use, and it must
be located outside of the vehicle.
To Unlock the Vehicles Doors
To unlock the vehicles door(s), grasp the door handle
and the door(s) will unlock.

NOTE:
If the vehicle has not been used for 72 hours or it has
been raining for 24 hours, you may have to pull a door
handle to reactivate this feature.
If the vehicles door locks are programmed to Unlock
Drivers Door 1st Press, only the drivers door will
unlock when the drivers door handle is grasped. If the
vehicles door locks are programmed to Unlock All
Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock if any door
handle is grasped. Refer to Remote Key Unlock
under Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this manual.
If you accidentally lock your RKE transmitter in the
vehicle using the door panel switch, ALL doors will
unlock and the horn will chirp three times after all
doors are closed. If you do this three times, the system
will not chirp and the doors will remain locked on the

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

third attempt. To re-enable the system the vehicle must


be unlocked with another valid RKE transmitter.
To Lock the Vehicles Doors
The vehicle doors can be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicles interior door panel.
To Place an RKE Transmitter in the Vehicle for
Safekeeping Vehicles Equipped with Keyless
Go only
If you want to lock an RKE transmitter in your vehicle by
using the door panel switch perform the following procedure:
1. With the desired RKE transmitter in the vehicle, press
the door lock switch located on the door panel. All doors
will lock. When all doors are closed you will hear three
chirps of the horn and the doors will unlock. This is the

same lock/unlock and chirping sound that you would


experience if you accidentally locked your RKE transmitter in the vehicle.
2. Open the door and repeat Step 1 two more times (three
times total). The doors will remain locked; no audible
warnings will occur.
NOTE: Any RKE transmitter that is locked in the
vehicle either by a passive lock, another RKE lock, or the
door panel lock switch will be disabled from Keyless Go.
The disabled RKE transmitter(s) will be re-enabled after a
passive unlock or RKE unlock.
Child Protection Door Lock
The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child
Protection Door Locks. If you push up on the lever on the
open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside
of the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the
Child Protection Door Locks.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Protection Door
Locks are engaged.

Child Protection Door Lock

WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the drivers
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACCESSORY position.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the first detent, release, and the window will go down


automatically. To cancel the Auto Down movement,
operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.

Power Window Switches

The power window switches remain active for up to


10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch has
an Auto Down feature. Press the window switch past

Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection


(Drivers and Front Passenger Door Only)
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during


Auto Up it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold it to close the window manually.

Window Lockout Switch


The window lockout switch on the drivers door allows
you to disable the window controls on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the window lockout button again.

WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting the Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Pull the window switch up and close the window completely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.

Window Lockout Switch

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.

Liftgate Release

WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

Liftgate Flipper Glass


The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.

WARNING!
To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.
Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: If a power malfunction to the power liftgate
latch should occur, an emergency liftgate latch release
can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate
latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover
located on the liftgate trim panel.

Liftgate Glass Release

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and right front passenger, and
window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to
a window. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.

NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator


design. This allows the airbags to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.

WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

WARNING! (Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a
poor driver and cause a collision which includes
you. This can happen far away from home or on
your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times to reduce or prevent injuries.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.

This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move


freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
(Continued)

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.

Latch Plate

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch


plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
(Continued)

Latch Plate to Buckle

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too

tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.

WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces wont be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt cant do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is
straight. If you cant straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have
it fixed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is


comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS


on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack from Belt

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage


In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will


prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
youll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use Automatic Locking mode anytime a child safety seat
is installed in the rear center seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until


the entire belt is fully extended.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency) Locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is


designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupants chest.

WARNING!
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belt Pretensioners


The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. This device improves the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are a single use item. After a collision that is
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
they must be replaced.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System


(BeltAlert)
If the drivers seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle the seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered,
BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt
Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the drivers seat
belt is buckled. BeltAlert will be reactivated if the
drivers seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized


dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the drivers seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (engine
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Warning Light to turn off.

3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle


and then re-buckle the drivers seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while
the drivers seat belt remains unfastened.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women


We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The drivers front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The front passenger airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the


driver, and front and rear passengers sitting next to a
window. They are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.

1 Driver Airbag
2 Passenger Airbag
3 Knee Bolster

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal


regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbags to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.

Window Airbag Location

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior


trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.

WARNING!
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the window bag.
The area where the window bag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during
inflation.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
allows the airbags to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity. Along with the seat belts,

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and
front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts
to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to Child Restraints in this section.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

You should read the instructions provided with your


child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If
You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual.

WARNING!
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags wont deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

Airbag System Components


The airbag system consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC)
Airbag Warning Light
Driver Airbag
Passenger Airbag
Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Interconnecting Wiring
Knee Impact Bolsters

Front Acceleration Sensors


Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
The Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) determines if
a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe enough to
require the front and/or side airbags to inflate. The
front airbag inflators are designed to provide different
rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the
ORC. The ORC will detect roll overs, not rear impacts.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning


Light for 2.5 to 8 seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound if the light comes on again after initial start
up.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you wont have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.

The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are


located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
are possible, based on collision severity and occupant
size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The
bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side or rollover
collisions. When the Occupant Restraint Control
(ORC) detects a collision requiring the window bags to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle, and both sides of the vehicle when rollover is
sensed. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 3 in (8 cm) thick when it is
inflated.

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of


the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) detects a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and
front passenger, and then to immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or


all of the following may occur:
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you havent healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat

irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,


see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instructions for cleaning.
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Enhanced Accident Response Feature


If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. The hazard
lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine.
In addition, after the vehicle has stopped moving, the
interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain
lit until the ignition switch is turned off.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure.
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Perchlorate Material special handling may


apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

block for blown fuses. Refer to Fuses in Section 7 of this


manual. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

Airbag Warning Light


You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:

Event Data Recorder (EDR)


In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to one-quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment
or near-deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an
airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
unavailable.

Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the 2.5


to 8 seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on,
Remains on after the 2.5 to 8 second interval, or
Flickers, or comes on and remains on for any period of
time while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse

NOTE:
A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant
airbag deployment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be


recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a

court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).


A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Otherwise required by law.

Transmission gear selection

Data parameters that may be recorded:

Cruise control status

Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status


for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system

Traction/stability control status

Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States, and all Canadian provinces, require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Time of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition


cycles and vehicle mileage)
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
Impact acceleration and angle
Seat belt status
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Engine control status (including engine speed)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System status

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

There are different sizes and types of restraints for


children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owners Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs
size.

Infants and Child Restraints


Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section.)

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used
in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or
death to infants in this position.
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler LLC also recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
The restraint must be appropriate for your childs
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates. The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor. Both types of seat belts are

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child


restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt (the cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary). For the second row center seat belt
with the automatic locking retractor, pull the belt from
the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. For
additional information, refer to Automatic Locking
Mode earlier in this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the

buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path


opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturers instructions tell you.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.

to

Older Children and Child Restraints


Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who are
older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction, are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are
older than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH Child
Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the
childs back is against the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the back.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower


Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicles rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicles seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicles seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap

kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all


the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played
with, and never leave your child unattended in the
vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints


in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicles seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicles seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicles seat belts. For typical installation instructions, refer to Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at


the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint


System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each


rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

Tether Strap Mounting

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with


separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
First, loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the
lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage
bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, locate
the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you
are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap
to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturers instructions.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belts
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight,
however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor


(ALR), pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extended from the retractor. Allow the
belt to return into the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child
restraint. Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in
this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from


the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still cant make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.

WARNING!
Always remove the subwoofer from the vehicle
whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer
are required for proper installation of a child restraining device. In the event of an accident, or under
severe vehicle maneuvers, leaving the subwoofer
unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or
fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.

Tether Strap Mounting

Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS


A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under
Engine Oil, under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT
MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

engine running for a extended period. If the vehicle is


stopped in an open area with engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode
when driving with any windows open, even if only
slightly, to help keep fresh air circulating inside the
vehicle; otherwise, poisonous gases could be drawn
into the vehicle.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the


Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged i.e., (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on, and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check, when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the bulb is not lit during starting, have it
replaced. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the DEFROST mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should be
able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper pressure.

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking
for fuel, coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE


CONTENTS
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 79
Drivers And Front Passenger Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped . . . 79
Power Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Heated Power Mirrors If Equipped . . . . . . 80
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped . . . 80

3
Hands-Free Communication (UConnect)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
UConnect System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Recognition System (VR)


If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 109
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Front Seat Adjustment Recline . . . . . . . . . 115
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . 116
Eight-Way Drivers Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Four-Way Passengers Power Seat If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front Heated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . . . 118

Rear Heated Seats If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 119


60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Driver Memory Seat If Equipped . . . . . . . . 123
Setting Memory Positions And Linking
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128


Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 129

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75

Automatic Headlight System


If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
SmartBeams If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Daytime Running Lights If Equipped . . . . 131
Automatic Headlight Leveling HID
Headlights Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Instrument Panel And Interior Lights . . . . . . 132
Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fog Lights If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
High Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 136
Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System . . 138
Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped . . . . . . . 138
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 140
Adjustable Pedals If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 141
Electronic Speed Control If Equipped . . . . . 142
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Garage Door Opener If Equipped . . . . . . . . 151

Rear Park Assist System If Equipped . . . . . . 145

Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 155

Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . 146

Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist


System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink


Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Service The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . 148

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . 149

Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Rear Camera If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off . . . . . . 149

Power Sunroof If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77

Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Retractable Cargo Area Cover If


Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160


Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Front Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Rear Power Outlet If Equipped . . . . . . . . 160
Power Inverter If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167


Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Rear Window Defroster If Equipped . . . . . 170

78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other objects. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature


All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Drivers and Front Passenger Outside Automatic
Dimming Mirror If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a outside automatic
dimming mirrors, they will operate when the inside
automatic dimming mirror is on. The outside mirrors
operate off the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare when the inside
mirror does.
Power Outside Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.

80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same


direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by


the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to Driver
Memory Seat in this section for details.
Heated Power Mirrors If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.

Power Mirror Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81

UConnect system operating instructions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located on the lower right
corner of the Radio faceplate.
UConnect is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., Call Mike Work or Dial
248-555-1212). Your cellular phones audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect system.
Lighted Vanity Mirror

HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect)


IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect)
system. Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for

NOTE: The UConnect system requires a cellular phone


equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Version 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect website for
supported phones.

82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For UConnect customer support, visit the


following websites:
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
www.dodge.com/uconnect
www.jeep.com/uconnect
or call 18778558400
UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the systems microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnect system is driven through your
Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile cellular phone.
UConnect features Bluetooth technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so

UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long
as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicles UConnect system. The UConnect system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83

Voice Recognition Button


Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
Operation section.
The UConnect system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone. See the
UConnect website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system. The volume of the UConnect system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from


the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect
system and to navigate through the UConnect menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the Ready prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying Setup and then
Phone Pairing, the following compound command
can be said: Setup Phone Pairing.

84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

For each feature explanation in this section, only the


combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry, or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
Phonebook and New Entry. Please remember, the
UConnect system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to Voice Tree in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say Help following
the beep. The UConnect system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the UConnect system from idle, simply press


the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owners Manual. The
UConnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85

The following are general phone to UConnect system


pairing instructions:
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Setup Phone Pairing.
When prompted, after the beep, say Pair a Phone and
follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.

You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a


priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your UConnect system. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your UConnect system. The priority
allows the UConnect system to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
UConnect system will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Dial.

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The system will prompt you to say the number you


want to call.
For example, you can say 234-567-8901.
The UConnect system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Call.
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say John Doe, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a


name in the phonebook, refer to Add Names to Your
UConnect Phonebook, in the phonebook.
The UConnect system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Phonebook New Entry.
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say Robert Smith or
Robert instead of Bob.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,


Home, Work, Mobile, or Pager). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, UConnect automatically
downloads your mobile phones phonebook.

Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook


Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
UConnect automatically downloads names (text names)
and number entries from the mobile phones phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access
Profile may support this feature. See UConnect website
for supported phones.
To call a name from downloaded (or UConnect)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in Call by Saying a
Name section.
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is
made to the UConnect, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the UConnect.

88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phones phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the UConnect. These can only be edited on
the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to UConnect on the next phone connection.
Phonebook Download Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, UConnect
allows the user to download entries from their phone via

Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the PHONE button


and say Phonebook Download. The system prompts,
Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The
system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from
your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owners Manual for
specific instructions on how to send these entries from
your phone.
NOTE:
The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
the UConnect system, and then send the address

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89

book entry via Bluetooth. Please see your phone


Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth connection.
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Phonebook Edit.
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.

Next, choose the number designation (home, work,


mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John
Does work number later using the Phonebook Edit
feature.
Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.

90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press the PHONE button to begin.


After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Phonebook Delete.
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say List
Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the UConnect system is playing the desired
entry and say Delete.
After you enter the name, the UConnect system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.

Note that only the phonebook entry in the current


language is deleted.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Phonebook Erase All.
The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be


deleted or edited.
List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Phonebook List Names.
The UConnect system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say Call.
NOTE: The user can also exercise Edit or Delete
operations at this point.
The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.

The selected number will be dialed.


Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call


Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial
or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,

refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section. To


combine two calls, refer to Conference Call in this
section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.

hold may not become active automatically. This is cell


phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
Press the PHONE button to begin.

Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress. After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect system.

Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on

Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say


Redial.
The UConnect system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can


continue on the UConnect system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect system for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect system to the mobile phone.
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UConnect System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect system is
using:
Press the PHONE button to begin.

After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say


the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system


is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:

If supported, this number may be programmable on


some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say Setup, followed by Emergency.

Press the PHONE button to begin.

The UConnect system does slightly lower your


chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.

After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say


Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.

WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect
system.

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:

certain companies, which time out a little too soon to


work properly with the UConnect system.

Press the PHONE button to begin.

Voice Mail Calling


To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to Working
with Automated Systems.

After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say


Towing Assistance.
NOTE:
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say Setup, followed by Towing Assistance.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to Working with Automated
Systems. Paging works properly except for pagers of

Working with Automated Systems


This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect
system.
When calling a number with your UConnect system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press


the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence
you wish to enter, followed by the word Send. For
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say, 3 7 4 6 # Send. Saying a number,
or sequence of numbers, followed by Send, is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number on
a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, Send. The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The Voice Recognition button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a..., you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, Pair a Phone to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press the PHONE button to begin.


After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Setup Confirmations. The UConnect system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the UConnect system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect system (while dialing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By

dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular


phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
audio system. The UConnect system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the UConnect system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect system:
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

Following the beep, say Mute.


In order to un-mute the UConnect system:
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
Following the beep, say Mute off.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the
UConnect system or vice versa, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Transfer Call.

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the


UConnect System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively connected
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone
and the UConnect system, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone Users Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Setup Phone Pairing.
When prompted, say List Phones.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The UConnect system will play the phone names of


all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To select or delete a paired
phone being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete. Also, see
the next two sections for an alternate way to select
or delete a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect system.
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts.
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.

The selected phone will be used for the next phone


call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones
Press the PHONE button to begin.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Setup Phone Pairing.
At the next prompt, say Delete and follow the
prompts.
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

Things You Should Know About Your UConnect


System
UConnect Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the UConnect mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
Setup, Voice Training command.

Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the


UConnect system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 12 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would


speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.

When navigating through an automated system such


as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say Send.

Make sure that no one other than you is speaking


during a voice recognition period.

Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is


not in motion is recommended.

Performance is maximized under:

It is not recommended to store similar sounding


names in the UConnect phonebook.

low-to-medium blower setting,


low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.

Phonebook (Downloaded and UConnect Local) name


recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar.
You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). 800 must be
spoken eight-zero-zero.
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be


compromised with the convertible top down.

Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by


lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

Far End Audio Performance

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be


compromised with the convertible top down.

Audio quality is maximized under:


low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows,
dry weather conditions, and
operation from the drivers seat.
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect system.

Bluetooth Communication Link


Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial

Voice Commands
Alternate(s)

pairing
phone book

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the equipment.
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) IF


EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.


The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as barging in. The system will be interrupted
and after the beep you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words Cancel,
Help, or Main Menu.

These commands are universal and can be used from any


menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say Help or Main Menu.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Commands
The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., Help).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition system is speaking. Please note the volume setting
for VR is different then the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say Main Menu to switch to the main menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:


Radio (to switch to the radio mode)
Disc (to switch to the disc mode)
Memo (to switch to the memo recorder)
System Setup (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Frequency (to change the frequency)
Next Station (to select the next station)
Previous Station (to select the previous station)
Radio Menu (to switch to the radio menu)
Main Menu (to switch to the main menu)

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Frequency (to change the frequency)
Next Station (to select the next station)
Previous Station (to select the previous station)
Radio Menu (to switch to the radio menu)
Main Menu (to switch to the main menu)

Previous Channel (to select the previous channel)


List Channel (to hear a list of available channels)
Select Name (to say the name of a channel)
Radio Menu (to switch to the radio menu)
Main Menu (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say Disc. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:

Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite
Radio. In this mode, you may say the following commands:

Track (#) (to change the track)

Channel Number (to change the channel by its


spoken number)

Main Menu (to switch to the main menu)

Next Channel (to select the next channel)

Next Track (to play the next track)


Previous Track (to play the previous track)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
New Memo (to record a new memo) During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:

Previous (to play the previous memo)


Delete (to delete a memo)
Delete All (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup say Setup. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:

Save (to save the memo)

Language English

Continue (to continue recording)

Language French

Delete (to delete the recording)

Language Spanish

Play Memos (to play previously recorded memos)


During the playback you may press the VR hardkey to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one
of the following commands:
Repeat (to repeat a memo)
Next (to play the next memo)

Tutorial
Voice Training
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep before speaking the
Barge In commands.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, say System Setup and once
you are in that menu then say Voice Training. This will
train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

SEATS
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
fully.

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Front Seat Adjustment Recline


To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward, and release the lever.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment


The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
on the right side of the drivers seat (all models) and on
the left side of the passengers seat (if equipped). Moving
the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support.

Eight-Way Drivers Power Seat


The drivers power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the drivers seat lower side trim. The
bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward,
and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback
recline adjustment.

Manual Lumbar Control

Power Seat Switches

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Four-Way Passengers Power Seat If Equipped


The front passengers power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim.
The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.

NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/down


adjustment.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head
restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as
High as practical. The head restraints have a locking
button which must be pushed in to lower the head
restraint to all positions. The restraints may be raised
without pushing in the button.

Adjustable Head Restraints

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Heated Seats If Equipped


The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the heater/air
conditioning controls). The heaters provide the same
average heat level for both cushion and back. After
turning ON the ignition, you can choose from High, Low,
or Off heat settings. Amber LEDs on the side of each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs are
illuminated for High, one for Low, and none for Off.
Press the switch once to select the High setting.
Press the switch a second time, to select the
Low setting. Press the switch a third time to
turn the heating elements Off.
When the High setting is selected, the heater will provide
a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
High-temperature level. If the High setting is selected,

the system will automatically switch to Low after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The Low setting will turn Off automatically
after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at Low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid
heated seat surfaces coming in contact and potential seat overheating, ALWAYS ensure that the seat
heater is in the Off position (amber lights indicate
High/Low/Off) before placing any of the seats into
a folded flat position (if equipped).
Rear Heated Seats If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.

Rear Heated Seat Switches

Press the switch once to select the High setting.


Press the switch a second time, to select the
Low setting. Press the switch a third time to
turn the heating elements Off.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the High setting is selected, the heater will provide


a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
High-temperature level. If the High setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to Low after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
the change. The Low setting will turn Off automatically
after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at Low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid
heated seat surfaces coming in contact and potential seat overheating, always ensure that the seat
heater is in the Off position (amber lights indicate
High/Low/Off) before placing any of the seats into
a folded flat position (if equipped).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

60/40 Split Rear Seat


To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.

NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)
to release.
Rear Seat Release

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Do not fold the rear seat down with the center
seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.

To Raise Rear Seat


Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.

WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in an accident. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.

Folding Rear Seat

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Storage Rear Seat Armrest (If Equipped)


The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage
armrest.

Armrest Storage Bin

Rear Seat Armrest

Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the
storage bin.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED


Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
drivers door panel can be used to recall the drivers seat,
drivers outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.

position. The memory system can accommodate up to


four RKE transmitters, each one linked to either of the
two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.

Driver Memory Switches

Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One


or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory

2. Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you


are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2
if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system
will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to
complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.
3. Adjust the drivers seat, recliner, and drivers sideview
mirror to the desired positions.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired


positions.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
drivers door.
8. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
1 or 2 on the drivers door. The next step must be
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.

11. Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic


Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter Yes. Refer
to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Customer-Programmable Features in Section 4 for more
information.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the drivers door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To recall the memory setting for driver two, press


memory button number 2 on the drivers door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the drivers seat, drivers
mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
2. Press and release memory button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.

3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located


on the drivers door.
4. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
1 on the drivers door.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
memory position, repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) CustomerProgrammable Features in Section 4 for more
information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

Easy Entry/Exit Seat


This feature provides automatic drivers seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
available:
The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/

driving position when the key is placed into the


ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
the ACC/ON position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Customer-Programmable
Features in Section 4 for more information.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD


Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below
the instrument panel and in front of the drivers door.

NOTE: To prevent possible damage, do not slam the


hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
LIGHTS

Hood Release Handle

2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left,


and lift the hood.

Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, passing light, interior
courtesy/dome lights, and optional fog lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
wheel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

Headlights and Parking Lights


Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation. Turn to the third detent for AUTO
headlight operation (if equipped).

Automatic Headlight System If Equipped


Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent
to activate the automatic headlight system.
This system performs two functions. With the engine
running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on and off based on the
surrounding light levels.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it
also has this customer programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode, and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on.

Headlight Switch

If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper


System, and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

approximately four minutes after the wipers completely


stop. Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this
section.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to Instrument Panel and Interior Lights for setting the instrument panel lights to full daytime intensity.
SmartBeams If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced, the SmartBeam mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Select Auto Headlamp Low/High Beams? Low/
High Beam. Refer to EVIC Customer-Programmable
Features in Section 4 of this manual.
2. Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

To Deactivate
1. Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually
deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the
system to function improperly.

Daytime Running Lights If Equipped


The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity
level whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK position. The lights will remain
on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/ACC, or
the parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must
be used for normal nighttime driving.
Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Instrument Panel and Interior Lights


When the multifunction lever is in the parking light,
headlight, or AUTO position (if equipped), rotating the
center portion of the lever up and down will increase and
decrease the brightness (dimmer control) of the instrument panel lights. Full daytime brightness on all electronic displays (odometer, overhead console, radio, and
Automatic Climate Control (if equipped) is obtained by
rotating the center portion of the control to the first
detent above the dimmer range. Rotating the control to
the second detent above the dimmer range turns the
interior lights on. Rotating the control to the Off
(extreme bottom) position disables all the interior lights,
even when the doors and liftgate are open. While in the
Off position the instrument panel lighting is at the
lowest light level and may not be suitable for night
driving.

Dimmer Control

Battery Saver Feature


If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light
position, parking light position, or the headlight position
when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position,
the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the
exterior and interior lights after eight minutes. Normal

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or


when the headlight switch is turned to another position.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
switch has been turned to LOCK/ACC, a chime will
sound when the drivers door is opened.
Fog Lights If Equipped
The fog light switch is located in the multifunction
lever. To activate the fog lights, turn on the park/
turn lights, low beam headlights, or Auto headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever. A
light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights
are on.

Front Fog Light Control

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog
lights.
A front fog light is a lighting device that provides
illumination forward of the vehicle under conditions
of fog, rain, snow, or dust. The front fog lights supplement the lower beam of a standard headlight system.
Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights
should be made to prevent excessive glare for other
drivers.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down, and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to
show proper operation of the left and right turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the
multifunction lever partially up or down.

Turn Signal Control

Turn Signal Auto-Mode


Tap the multifunction lever once, and the turn signal (left
or right) will flash three times and automatically turn off.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

High Beam Switch


Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the
multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on
until the lever is released.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30, 60,
or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF. To
activate the headlight delay, the multifunction lever must
be rotated to the Off position after the ignition switch
is turned to LOCK/ACC. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Customer-Programmable
Features in Section 4 to turn this feature On/Off or set
the time interval.

High Beam/Low Beam Select

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Lights
The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights (below the
instrument panel), an overhead console light (which
contains both driver and passenger reading lights), reading lights (located above the rear doors), and a rear cargo
light. Opening a door, or turning the center of the
multifunction control lever to the extreme up position,
will activate all interior courtesy lights.
Front Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each
light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the
lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the
lens a second time. There are also reading lights located
above the rear doors. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn these
lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second
time.

Front Map/Reading Lights

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS


The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a
switch in the right side control lever. Turn the end of the
control lever to select Low, High, or one of the five speed
sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds. Refer to
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System in this

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

section. For information on the rear wiper and washer,


refer to Rear Window Features in this section.

NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end of
the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired

delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a
cycle every 1/2 second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the


driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the OFF position when not using the system.

The rain sensing system has protection features for the


wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:

NOTE:
The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the Low or High speed position.

Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is


first turned ON, the rain sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32F (0C).

The rain sensing feature may not function properly


when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) CustomerProgrammable Features in Section 4 of this manual.

Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the


ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the rain sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN


This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle


downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Tilt Steering Column

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED


This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be
adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in
actuating the pedals.

Adjustable Pedal Switch

Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals


forward (away from the driver).
Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The pedals can be adjusted while driving.


The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) or when the Electronic Speed Control is
ON. A message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked
out (Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control
Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In
Reverse). Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) in Section 4 for more information.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED


When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedals path.
Electronic Speed Control Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control System on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady


speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the lever towards
you, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing
the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is ON, speed can be
increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new speed will be set.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph


(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h).
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is ON,
push down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a
1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be
reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON/
OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed.

To Accelerate For Passing


Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED


The Rear Park Assist System provides visible and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning
Section and Note Section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last
system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position.
The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the
shift lever is in REVERSE. If the Rear Park Assist System
is enabled at this shift lever position, the system will be

active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will be
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12
to 59 in (30 to 150 cm) from the rear fascia in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location and
orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Park Assist Warning Display


The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.

When the ignition is turned to the ON position, the


warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about
one second. Each side of the warning display has six
yellow and two red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the
obstacle when the red LED is ON.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES


DISPLAY LED
1st LED
2nd LED
3rd LED
4th LED
5th LED
6th LED
7th LED
8th LED

OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:


REAR CORNERS
REAR CENTER
59 in (150 cm)
51 in (130 cm)
45 in (115 cm)
31.5 in (80 cm)
39 in (100 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
28 in (70 cm)
16 in (40 cm)
20 in (50 cm)
6 in (15 cm)
12 in (30 cm)

NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the


radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

LED COLOR

AUDIBLE SIGNAL

Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Red
Red

Yes, Half Second


None
None
None
None
None
Yes, Intermittent
Yes, Continuous

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System


The Rear Park Assist System can be enabled and disabled
with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the
instrument panel.

When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the


instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DISABLED message. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this manual. When the
shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
message.
The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the
Rear Park Assist System is disabled or defective. The
Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the
system is enabled.

Rear Park Assist Switch

Service The Rear Park Assist System


When the Rear Park Assist System is defective, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM message. Refer to Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this manual.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System


Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles with a MyGiG radio may be equipped with a
rearview camera (located on the rear liftgate) that allows
you to see an on-screen image (on the navigation radio
screen) of the rear of your vehicle, whenever the vehicle
is put into REVERSE.

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Camera System. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
Turning the Rear Camera On or Off
1. Press the menu hard key.
2. Select system set up soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
enable rear camera in reverse soft key.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of


the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
check entire surroundings displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.

CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, the Rear Camera system
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear
Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear
Camera System.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink),
storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof
switches.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is


opened. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a push/push design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.

Overhead Console

Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED


HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicles
battery.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead


console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink channels.

HomeLink Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop
and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Programming HomeLink
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display CLEARING
CHANNELS. Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)


from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL #
TRAINING to CHANNEL # TRAINED.
Then release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers


may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the Gate Operator/Canadian Programming section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna


wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).

If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL # TRAINING repeat Step 3.


NOTE: After training a HomeLink channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the learn or training button.

1 Garage Door Opener


2 Training Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

6. Firmly press and release the learn or training


button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the Learn button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming


Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace Programming
HomeLink Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(cycle) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The


EVIC display will change from CHANNEL # TRAINING to CHANNEL # TRAINED.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming
HomeLink earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.


2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL #
TRAINING. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS
CLEARED. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the
device.
The term IC: before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED


The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

Opening Sunroof - Express


Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.

Pinch Protect Override


If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the V button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is


open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation


The power sunroof switches remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
POWER OUTLETS
Front Power Outlet
To the left and right of the convenience tray (lower center
of instrument panel) is an outlet for electric-powered
accessories. Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to
access the outlet.
Rear Power Outlet If Equipped
The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left
rear cargo area.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not use a three-prong adapter.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Rear Power Outlet

The rear power outlet is a direct feed from the battery and
will receive power whether the ignition is in the ON or
LOCK position. All accessories connected to this outlet
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not
in use to protect the battery against discharge.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicles battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicles battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicles battery.

POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED


There is a 115Volt, 150Watt inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. This outlet can be used to power small
appliances and electronics.

Power Inverter

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Press the power inverter switch (located on the upper


switch bank) to turn the power on to the outlet. Press the
switch again to turn the power off.

the inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the
inverter is producing AC power.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!

Power Inverter Switch

NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed,


there will be a delay of approximately one second before

To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:


Do not use a 3Prong Adaptor.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS
In the center console, there are two cupholders for the
front seat passengers.

Rear Cupholders

CARGO AREA FEATURES


Front Cupholders

The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that


pull out from the lower center of the rear seat.

Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multifunction control lever to the extreme top position. If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is open,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

pushing on the cargo light lens surface will turn off all
interior lamps. Push on the lens surface a second time to
restore the interior lights to normal operation.
Rear Storage Compartment
The rear storage compartment is located on the drivers
side behind the second row seat.

Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped


NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.

Rear Storage Compartment

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in


place.

WARNING!
In an accident, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.

Rear Cargo Cover

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks


The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used
to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
(Continued)

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.

Cargo Load Floor


The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic
lined tray which holds a variety of items.

Cargo Load Floor

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In


order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
procedure:
NOTE: The cargo load floor latches should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.
1. Flip up pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
parallel to the slotted hole in tray.
3. Lift tray over loop(s), and reposition tray.
4. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
perpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.
5. Push loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to the top
of the tray.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES


Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the on position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rear


window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the
rear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed,
the rear wiper switch, or the ignition switch, needs to be
turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned


OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the Park
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this
happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to Park.

Rear Window Defroster If Equipped


Press this button (located on the Climate Control
panel) to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated side mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the
button will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off after
about 10 minutes of operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL


CONTENTS
Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Instrument Cluster

Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) If


Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 179


Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 187
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable


Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Performance Pages If Equipped . . . . . . . . 194

Sales Code REQ AM/FM Stereo Radio And


6Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Keyless Go Display If Equipped . . . . . . . . 197

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 207

Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD


And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 215

Sales Code RES AM/FM Stereo Radio With


CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 217

Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . 225

List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA


Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD


And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA


Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio


(RER/REN) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operating Instructions Voice Recognition
System (VR) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operating Instructions Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect) If Equipped . 223
Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 234


Sales Code RES/RSC AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . 235
Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 245


Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 245
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius


Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 252
Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Connecting The iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . 253

Controlling The iPod Using Radio


Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone


(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Kicker High Performance Sound System With


Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


Satellite Radio If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . 251
System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Sirius Backseat TV If Equipped . . . . . . . . 258

176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Video Entertainment System (Sales Code


XRV) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Kicker Mobile Surround (KMS1) If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Remote Sound System Controls
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

CD/DVD Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 263


Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 263
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4

- Air Outlet
- Instrument Cluster
- Radio
- Glove Compartment

5
6
7
8

Upper Switch Bank


Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
Storage Bin
Power Outlet

9 - Lower Switch Bank


10 - Climate Controls
11 - Ignition Switch
12 - Storage Bin

178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION


1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Brake Warning Light
The Brake Warning Light will come on when
the ignition is first turned on, and stay on
briefly as a bulb check. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the bulb repaired promptly. If the light stays on longer, it may be an
indication that the parking brake has not been released.
If the light remains on when the parking brake is off, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction
or low fluid level. In this case, the Brake Warning Light
will remain on until the cause is corrected. If a brake
malfunction is indicated, immediate repair is necessary
and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is
dangerous.

3. Turn Signal Indicators


The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.

180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

5. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)


The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

6. Airbag Warning Light


This light turns on and remains on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or turns on while
driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light
is not on.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181

If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should


be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not turn
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM).
9. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.

10. Oil Pressure Warning Light


This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).

182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light


Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or


alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads H
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the H and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center later in this section.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185

15. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning


Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light If
Equipped
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the drivers seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb


check or when driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to Occupant
Restraints Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) in Section 2 for more information.
17. Cruise Indicator
This indicator lights when the speed control
system is turned ON.
18. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or

186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading


before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
19. Shift Lever Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
shift lever selection.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
20. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the

shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light


should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,
see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light
is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service
is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when
the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
22. Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
23. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while


driving, turn off some of the vehicles non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER


(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.

24. Low Fuel Warning Light


When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.3 U.S.
Gallons (8.7 Liters) this light will come on and
remain on until fuel is added. The Low Fuel
Warning Light may turn on and off again, especially
during and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns.
This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The EVIC consists of the following:


System Status
Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
Compass Display
Outside Temperature Display

MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Personal Settings, and System Status.
FUNCTION SELECT Button
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select
the displayed function (YES (Y) or NO (N).

Trip Computer Functions


Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with DriverSelectable Surround [DSS])
Performance Pages (if equipped)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:

SCROLL Button
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), and System Status Messages.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

COMPASS/TEMPERATURE Button
Press
and
release
the
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.

WRONG KEY KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO


VEHICLE

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)


Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:

PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PROGRAMMED

TURN SIGNAL ON

LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

PERFORM SERVICE

X DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

DAMAGED KEY KEY DOES NOT COMMUNICATE

LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)

KEY NOT PROGRAMMED KEY NOT PROGRAMMED

KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PROGRAM LIMIT

SERVICE SECURITY KEY


DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)


LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

UPSHIFT (with graphic)

HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

CHECK GAUGES

HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON

LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF

HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

PARK ASSIST DISABLED

HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

SERVICE SUSPENSION

HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP

LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

WARNING! LIMIT SPEED

LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

CHECK GASCAP

WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)

ESP OFF

COOLANT LOW (with graphic)

IOD FUSE OUT

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET


MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET
MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCKLED (with graphic)
MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK
DRIVER 1 MEMORY
DRIVER 2 MEMORY
ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CONTROL SET
ADJ. PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE
TIRE LOW PRESSURE
CHECK TPM SYSTEM
LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)

RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)


LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
Only)
RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
Stereo (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound [DSS])
Video Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
Audio Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
Braking Distance (if equipped with Performance
Pages)

192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1/8 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)


1/4 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
Instantaneous G-Force (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
Peak G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)
SERVICE KEYLESS SYS
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
KEY FOB NOT DETECTED
VEHICLE NOT IN PARK
IGNITION POSITION
PRESS BRAKE TO START
PUSH BUTTON OR INSERT KEY
TURN TO ON

Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
Distance To Empty
Trip A
Trip B
Elapsed Time
Service Distance
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Temperature
Display Units of Measure In
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:


Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a LOW FUEL message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW
FUEL message and a new DTE value will display.

Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Engine Oil Pressure
Shows the current engine oil pressure. The scale will read
from 0100 psi (0689 kPa).
Engine Oil Temperature
Shows the current engine oil temperature. The scale will
read from 140 300F (60 149C).

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Display Units of Measure In


To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will display during this three second
window).

Performance Pages If Equipped

WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

The Performance Pages include the following features:


0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
Braking Distance
1/8 Mile
1/4 Mile
Instantaneous G-Force
Peak G-Force
To access, press and release the MENU button until
Performance Pages displays in the EVIC. Press the
SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:

0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)


When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word READY will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION
SELECT button is pressed.
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run time and display the vehicles best
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time.
To clear the vehicles best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicles braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
The word READY will flash when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
The distance and speed measurements will continue to
display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.

Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the


current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
and the vehicles speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/
4 mile).
The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach
1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
The time and speed will continue to display until the
FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and display the vehicles best 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) run.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

To clear the vehicles best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,


press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(longitudinal and lateral) along with a friction circle that
displays the directions of the forces.

Keyless Go Display If Equipped


When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
change ignition states, the Keyless Go icon momentarily
appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition
state.

Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-force
values (two longitudinal and two lateral).
When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
peak force values.
Keyless Go Display

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the


new ignition state. If desired, the ignition state graphic
can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC
MENU button until the display appears.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But
when the ignition state is changed, the display always
re-appears.
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button to display
one of eight compass readings and the outside
temperature.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will

display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may


also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is
displayed in the EVIC.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to


start the calibration. The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. For the most accurate compass performance,
the compass variance must be set using the following
procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Overhead console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.


2. Press and hold the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until the Compass Variance message, and the last variance zone number,
display in the EVIC.

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button


until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE
button to exit.
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until Surround
Sound displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
Stereo
Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable


Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection. Please refer to Language Selection in
the HANDSFREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect)
section of this manual for details.
Auto Door Locks
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will lock
automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or
NO (N) appears.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When YES (Y) is selected, all of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is stopped, and the transmission is in
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
appears.

Remote Key Unlock


When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the
drivers door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passengers doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press
appears.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry
and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st
Press, all doors will unlock no matter which handle is
grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
the drivers door will unlock when the drivers door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
programmed touching the handle more than once will

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

only result in the drivers door opening. You have to


touch a passenger handle to unlock all doors passively
when Drivers Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
Sound Horn with Lock
When YES (Y) is selected, a short horn sound will occur
when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y)
or NO (N) appears.
Flash Lamps with Lock
When YES (Y) is selected, the front and rear turn signals
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn with Lock feature. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

Headlamp Off Delay


When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0,
30, 60, or 90 appears.
Automatic High Beams (Available with SmartBeam
Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to
Lights/SmartBeams If Equipped in Section 3 of this
manual for more information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto


Headlights Only)
When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual.
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped
When YES (Y) is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)

appears. When NO (N) is selected, the system reverts to


the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Service Interval
When this feature is selected, a service interval between
2,000 (3 200 km) and 6,000 mi (10 000 km) in 500 mi
(800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select distances between
2,000 (3 200 km) and 6,000 mi (10 000 km) in 500 mi
(800 km) increments.
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected, the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat


Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N)
appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to Easy Entry/Exit Seat under Driver
Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more
information.
Key Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, handsfree system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes

after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle


door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until OFF, 30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears.
Passive Entry
When ON is selected, the Passive Entry System allows
you to unlock the vehicles door(s) and trunk without
using the RKE transmitter unlock button, or the unlock
button located on the vehicles interior door panel. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until ON or OFF appears.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

Display Units of Measure In:


The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or
METRIC appears.
System Status

Press and release the MENU button until one of the


following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
System OK
System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
active System Warnings.)
Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires.) For additional information,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Section 5 of
this manual.

Tire Pressure Display

NOTE: Tires heat up during normal driving conditions.


Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to
6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions.
Refer to Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures in Section 5 for additional information.

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units


in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
SALES CODE REQ AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.

REQ Radio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode


NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Voice Recognition Button (UConnect Hands-Free


Phone) If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With
UConnect message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect Hands-Free Phone) If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With
UConnect message will display on the radio screen.

TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button


and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third


time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE Button


Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

Program Type
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft

16-Digit Character
Display
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft

Program Type
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon


is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:

Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will


switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll


through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).

Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change


the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).

DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between


playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).

NOTE:
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and
OFF (if equipped).
VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (if
equipped).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the


mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/


SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.

Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows


you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.

Audio Language If Equipped


Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting other. Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.

Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the


user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select other.

Subtitle Language If Equipped


Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting other. Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Subtitles If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to High, and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is Normal.
Aspect Ratio If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before


loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by


repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and


MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding


button number will display.

CAUTION!

Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

The radio may shut down during extremely hot


conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC


position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
INSERT DISC, insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc
is loading and READING DISC when the radio is
reading the disc.

CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.

Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc(s)


Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

SCAN Button (CD MODE)


Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode.

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files


The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:


Maximum number of directory levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Maximum number of folders: 100
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as keep
disc open after writing are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and


MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
WMA
Specification
WMA

Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

Playback of MP3/WMA Files


When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option
before writing to the disc.

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)


Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to elapsed time display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed


time priority mode.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the


devices volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the devices volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the devices volume
down.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or


more and radio will display song titles for each file.

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)


No function.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)


No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

Operating Instructions Voice Recognition


System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in
Section 3.
For UConnect Voice Recognition System (VR), refer to
Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)


Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone


(UConnect) (If Equipped)
Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to Satellite Radio in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS
DTS and DTS 2.0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO


(RER/REN) IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the units faceplate.
The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,
CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive
(HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in
(16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation
(RER) users manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions Voice Recognition
System (VR) If Equipped
For the radio, refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in
Section 3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

Operating Instructions Hands-Free


Communication (UConnect) If Equipped
Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Global Positioning System (GPS) RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the systems
clock very accurate, once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock RER/REN
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

3. Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed. The


clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word Hour with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word Save is displayed.

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Changing Daylight Savings Time


When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words Daylight Savings. Touch the
screen where the words Daylight Savings are displayed to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The


clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off.
Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is
Off are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your


selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word Page is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed.
SALES CODE RES AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right


side of the radio faceplate.
RES Radio

Operating Instructions Radio Mode


NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)


Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.

TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.

Electronic Volume Control


The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the On/Volume control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.

Clock Setting Procedure

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be


set at the same volume level as last played.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/


Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.

SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.

1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll


control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.

Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and


TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SET/RND Button To Set the Pushbutton


Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding


button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

Inserting Compact Disc(s)


Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.

CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD


Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within


10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK


button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)


Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)


The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:


Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after
writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats


The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

Playback of MP3 Files


When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option
before writing to the disc.

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode


The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicles
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

SALES CODE RES/RSC AM/FM STEREO


RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to


auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
devices volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the devices volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the devices volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

Operating Instructions Radio Mode


NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio


will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) If Equipped
Refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect Hands-Free
Phone) If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With
UConnect message will display on the radio screen.

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Phone Button (UConnect Hands-Free Phone) If


Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With
UConnect message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/


Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time


and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.

RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.

Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and


TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time


and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MUSIC TYPE Button


Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country

Program Type
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues

16-Digit Character
Display
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon


is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:

Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow


you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by


repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and


MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio


ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.

CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD


Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within


10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK


button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)


Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)


The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With


200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after
writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3 File Formats


The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected


by the following:
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin

playing the files contained in that folder (or the next


folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed
time priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to elapsed time display.

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode


The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicles
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
devices volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the devices volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the devices volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).

Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone


(UConnect) (If Equipped)
Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to Satellite Radio in this section.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with UConnect. For sales code
RER, REN and REZ touch-screen radio UCI feature, refer
to the separate RER, REN or REZ Users Manual. UCI is
available only if equipped as an option with these radios.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the
vehicles sound system through a 16pin connector using
the provided interface cable.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and


iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apples
website for software updates.
NOTE:
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod,
use the separate 16pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to
the vehicles 16pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicles UCI

system (iPod may take a few seconds to connect), the


iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16pin connector port, prior to connecting the cable.
If the iPod battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using the optional connection cable to connect an
iPod to the vehicles UCI 16pin connector port:
The iPod audio can be played on the vehicles sound
system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to


Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.

Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while


playing a track, skips to the next track.

The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI


connector.

Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one


click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.

Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons


To get into the UCI (iPod) mode and access a connected
iPod, press the AUX button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod) mode, iPod audio tracks (if
available from iPod) start playing over the vehicles
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod and display data:
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.

Jump backward in the current track by pressing and


holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this
button at any other time in the track it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod
mode to repeat the current playing track.
Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the

current list and then forward to the next song. To stop


SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod.
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in
wrap-around mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod.
Preset 1 Playlists
Preset 2 Artists

Preset 3 Albums
Preset 4 Genres
Preset 5 - Audiobooks
Preset 6 Podcasts
Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod then you can follow

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.


Not all iPod sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod.

CAUTION!
Leaving the iPod (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturers guidelines.
Placing items on the iPod, or connections to the
iPod in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving.
Failure to following this warning could result in an
accident.
SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:


ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

Selecting Satellite Mode


Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.

Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the


form of short audio mutes.

Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.

Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can


cause signal blockage.

Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.

Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can


cause intermittent reception.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode


NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)


Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by


repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
Section 3.

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM


WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS)
IF EQUIPPED
The removable subwoofer is located in the rear cargo
area, and is fastened in place using the child restraint
anchors, located on the left rear passenger seatback.
Installing The Subwoofer
1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.

2. Align the left outside edge of the subwoofer with the


outside edge of the inner cargo tie down hook.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

3. Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so


that the rear edge lines up with the end of the load floor.

4. Connect the electrical connector.


5. Fold the left rear passenger seat rearward into the
upright position. The rear tether anchors should engage
the hooks located on the back of the subwoofer.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Removing The Subwoofer


1. Lower the left rear passenger seat.

SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED


Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video channels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES), RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.


3. Remove the subwoofer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES


CODE XRV) IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES (Video Entertainment System) consists of a LCD (liquid crystal display) screen, a batterypowered remote control, and two headsets. Refer to your
VES Users Manual for detailed operating instructions.
The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats.

Lowering the Display Screen

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Kicker Mobile Surround (KMS1) If Equipped


The VES for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker
Mobile Surround (KMS1). This feature offers the ultimate movie experience by providing surround sound
uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle.

Remote Control Location

The KMS1 Video Surround mode activates whenever a


video source is selected, unless the system is already in
Audio Surround mode. DSS modes for video sources
are Stereo, Audio Surround, and Video Surround.
When in Video Surround mode, balance and fade are set
automatically by the KMS1 system to provide the
ultimate surround sound experience.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF


EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a


pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, Etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.

Remote Sound System Controls

Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will Seek down for the next listenable station.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The button located in the center of the left-hand control


will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:

CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the


surface.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the


second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,


wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Temperature Control
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by
the driver and passenger. This is accomplished by a dual
sun-sensor in the top of the instrument panel, and an
infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit.
There are also various sensors monitored by this system
which take account for vehicle speed, A/C pressure,
outside temperature, and engine cooling temperature.
The infrared sensor independently measures the surface
temperature of the driver and passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the airflow temperature, the airflow volume, and amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO


position should be used when more airflow is desired, or
when rear seat occupants are present. Dial in the comfort
setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating
the drivers or passengers control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.

Automatic Temperature Controls

NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent


a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO,
and not the actual air temperature.
Turn the mode control (on the right) knob to AUTO, and
then turn the blower control (on the left) knob to either
LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply


allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF (O) position on the blower control knob stops the
system completely.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation. However, if the driver and/or passenger temperature knobs
are set to the full hot or full cold positions, the air
temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

respectively. With the temperature setting in these positions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort
control.
The air conditioning in this system is automatic. Pressing this button while in AUTO
Air
mode will cause the LED to flash three times
Condi- and remain off. This indicates that the system is
tioning in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is
not necessary.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing this button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation
Recircu- mode. This can be used when outside condilation tions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. This will cause the LED
to illuminate.

NOTE:
The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the climate control sensors location.
Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation
of this system.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
remain off until the engine warms up. However, the
fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is
selected or if you manually select a blower speed.
Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned
off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a
noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of
normal operation.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you


can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions in automatic the system
is blowing air out of the defrost vents. When these
conditions are present, and the Recirculation button
is pressed, the indicator will flash and remain off. This
tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation
mode at this time. If you would like to go to Recirculation mode, you must first move your mode knob to
Panel, Panel/Floor, or Floor, then press the Recirculation button. This feature will reduce the possibility
of window fogging.

Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature
Control, and Manual. This means the customer can
override the blower, mode, and disable the Automatic
Temperature Control completely.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate
controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O (Off)
position.
Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a


temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full
counterclockwise position, the system will deliver full
hot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode
knob to one of the following positions. When the Mode is
set to any position other than AUTO, the automatic
control of air temperature is disabled. The user must
adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature.
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.

NOTE: The defrost mode is not automatically selected.


It must be manually selected, when desired.
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered
to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
maintained.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is
delivered to defrost while in floor mode, so that comfort
can be maintained.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air
flows through the registers in the back of the center
console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while
the floor outlets deliver heated air.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
Air Conditioning
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
and off during manual operation only. Conditioned outside air is then directed through the

outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button


includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
is selected.
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
Recirculation
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The Recirculation mode should
only be used temporarily. The button includes
an LED that illuminates, which indicates that the Recirculation mode is active. You may use this feature
separately.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the


windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the Recirculate button to return to outside
air. Some temperature/humidity conditions will cause
captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation mode to be selected while in the defrost
or defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use Recirculation
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
blink and then turn off.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when its rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake

button) on will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature


control, air direction, and blower speed to maintain
comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant, during the summer, to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower
gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed.
When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
shift into NEUTRAL (N) and depress the accelerator
slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow
and fan speed.

Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an


automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips Chart

STARTING AND OPERATING


CONTENTS
Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Keyless Go (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Extremely Cold Weather
(Below 20F Or 29C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual


Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 283
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

AutoStick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 281

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Tire Safety Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 305

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 306

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Tires General Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . 296

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 313

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . 297

Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

TSC (Trailer Sway Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

ESP/BAS Warning Lamp And ESP/TCS


Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314


Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

STARTING AND OPERATING 275

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 317

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer


Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 322
MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . 332


Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.

WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidents
can also be caused by pressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle
fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
Keyless Go (If Equipped)
This function allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Keyless Go ignition key (FOBIK)
can be detected inside of the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 277

Removing and Re-Installing the Engine Start/Stop


Button
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be removed
from the receptacle to allow the vehicle ignition to be
controlled conventionally by inserting the FOBIK. The
button may be removed using the valet key from the
FOBIK as a thin tool. Insert the metal part of the valet key
under the chrome bezel at the 6 oclock position, and
gently pry the button loose.
To reinstall the button, position it with its lettering
oriented horizontal and readable. Gently insert the button into the receptacle by pressing on the center of the
button. If the button slips in easily, it has been installed
correctly. Press firmly on the center of the button to seat
the button into the receptacle.
The ENGINE START/STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position.

Keyless Go Functions With Drivers Foot Off


The Brake Pedal (In PARK Position)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once (ACC
position) to activate the radio, wipers, and windows.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice (ON
position) to start the engine.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times
(OFF position) to turn off the ignition switch.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or


NEUTRAL. From any ignition state, press and hold the
brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds. If you wish to
stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine
starting, press the button again.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in

10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the


LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button. If the shift lever is not in
PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds and the ignition state changes to ACCESSORY (ACC). Regardless if the ignition state changes to
ACCESSORY (ACC) or OFF, the engine is shut off.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below 20F or 29C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

STARTING AND OPERATING 279

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get


it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for
proper jump-starting procedures and follow them
carefully.

280 STARTING AND OPERATING

Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using ENGINE


START/STOP Button
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
with your right foot, and then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the normal starting procedure.

the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.

Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using Fob With Integrated


Key
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push

After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

STARTING AND OPERATING 281

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of PARK.

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override


Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed. To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover which is located on the
PRNDL bezel.
4. Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.

Interlock Manual Override

6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.


7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer, if the shift lock manual override has been used.

STARTING AND OPERATING 283

With Keyless Go If Equipped


To activate the override, with a valid keyfob (FOBIK)
inside of the vehicle, and without the brake pedal
pressed, press the START/STOP button once to go to the
ACC position, or twice to go to the ON position. Then,
press the pink-colored tab through the access port with a
small flat-bladed screwdriver or alike. While pressing the
override tab, move the shift lever out of the PARK
position. When complete, return the override cover to its
original position.
5Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.

WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.

284 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARK
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should apply
the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key from the ignition. Once the key
is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked
in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave children unattended inside a vehicle.

REVERSE
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can roll
freely. Do not shift into the NEUTRAL position while
driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of
skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
DRIVE
Shift into DRIVE only when the vehicle is at a complete
stop and the brakes are firmly applied. The transmission
automatically upshifts through fifth gear. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions. For additional shifting
information, refer to Autostick later in this section.

STARTING AND OPERATING 285

Rocking the Vehicle


If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
between DRIVE and REVERSE, while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.

rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating


and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and


Traction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF
before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to Electronic
Brake Control System in Section 3 of this manual.

When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between


DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.

The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Racing the engine or
spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing
the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five

CAUTION!

AUTOSTICK
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver
with more control. Autostick allows the driver to increase engine braking ability, control upshift and downshift points, and enhance the driving experience. This
system can also provide the driver with more control
during passing, city driving, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

Autostick Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, the lever
can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to
engage the AutoStick mode. Moving the shift lever to
the right (+) or the left (-) will engage the Autostick
mode. In normal driving mode (Boxed D displayed in
the PRNDL), moving the shift lever to the right (+) will
engage the Autostick mode putting the transmission in
the currently engaged gear. Moving the shift lever to the
Left (-) will engage the Autostick mode and downshift
the transmission 1 gear. For example, the transmission is
in Normal Mode and is currently operating in 3rd gear, a
boxed D is displayed in the PRNDL, a push to the right
will engage the Autostick mode in 3rd and a Boxed 3
will be displayed in the PRNDL. A push to the left (-) will
engage Autostick mode and downshift to 2nd gear and
a Boxed 2 will be displayed in the PRNDL. Once
Autostick mode is engaged, a move to the right (+) or
left (-) will trigger a upshift (+) or trigger a downshift (-).

NOTE: In the Autostick mode, the transmission will


shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is manually selected by the driver.
The transmission will not allow a downshift if the downshift would result in a engine overspeed condition. The
transmission will always allow a upshift from 1st to 2nd
gear, however 2nd - 3rd, 3rd - 4th, and 4th 5th upshifts
will not be allowed if the vehicle speed is to low to
maintain operation in the selected gear. The transmission
will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (D+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
When in the Autostick mode, as the engine RPM nears
the engine maximum speed, an UPSHIFT message will
appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) portion of your instrument cluster. This message
appears in order to alert the driver that the engine speed

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

is approaching its maximum value and a upshift to the


next gear is required. In the event that the driver does not
upshift, the engine control system will automatically do it
for the driver. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information
Center in Section 4 of this manual.

The transmission will automatically downshift to first


gear when coming to a stop. Tapping the shift lever to
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in 2nd
gear. After starting, the driver should continue to
manually upshift (D+) as the vehicle is accelerated.

Shifting into or out of the Autostick mode can be done


at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal. When the driver wishes to engage Autostick,
simply move the shift lever to the left or right (D-/D+)
position while in DRIVE.

Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy


conditions.

Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to
disengage Autostick. The transmission will now operate
automatically; shifting between the five available gears.
General Information
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.

Avoid using speed control when Autostick is engaged.


The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick is
engaged.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick is engaged.

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

Power Steering Fluid Check


The power steering system requires the use of
MOPARHydraulic System Power Steering (P/N
05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.

WARNING!
Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), or
other types of power steering fluids, when servicing
the power steering system of this vehicle. Damage to
the power steering system can result from the use of
the wrong power steering fluid.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces.
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light


indicates only that the parking brake is applied. It does
not indicate the degree of brake application.

the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the


transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the selector out of PARK.

WARNING!

Parking Brake

Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and


the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing

Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

WARNING! (Continued)
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate

computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent


wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!
Significant over or under inflation of tires can lead to
loss of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot
lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may
feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during


the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.

WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety
or the safety of others.

CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed after-market radios or telephones.

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing


sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake
System is functioning.

Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,


which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking or stopping.

WARNING!

Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially


when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.

To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,


follow these tips:
Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.

After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes


may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM


Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), and
ESP (Electronic Stability Program). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with TSC (Trailer Sway
Control).
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to Anti-Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.

WARNING!
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
users safety or the safety of others.
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to


a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
ESP Partial Off mode. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability Program) in this section for more information.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicles braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
pump the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety or
the safety of others.

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)


This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.

WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)


This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than


appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light (located in the instrument
cluster), starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the
ESP/TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road conditions.

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESPequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
users safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 2 available operating modes.
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this On

mode. This mode should be used for most driving


situations. ESP should only be turned to Partial Off
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
ESP OFF switch. When in Partial Off mode, the TCS
portion of ESP, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
ESP/TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP
would normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF
switch. This will restore the normal ESP On mode of
operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

Off mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.

ESP OFF Switch

NOTE: To improve the vehicles traction when driving


with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the ESP Partial
Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the ESP Partial

TSC (Trailer Sway Control)


TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
Trailer Towing in Section 5 of this manual for more
information on towing a trailer with your vehicle. When
TSC is functioning, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled


when the ESP system is in the Partial Off mode.

WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/
BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. They should both go out with the engine
running.

If the ESP/BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system, or both. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking


sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION


Tire Markings

1 U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)


2 Size Designation
3 Service Description

4 Maximum Load
5 Maximum Pressure
6 Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the


letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter T
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

Tire Sizing Chart


EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
R means radial construction
D means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

Tire Identification Number (TIN)


The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall


tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location


NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the drivers side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:


1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section
of this manual.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and


trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,


gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
Vehicle Loading in this section.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and


passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your


vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit


1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg
on your vehicles placard.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs


(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading


can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the Tire Pressure


Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated. Vehicle
handling and braking may be reduced. You could
have an accident and be severely or fatally injured.

TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION


Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with run flat tires. Although the
tires are designed with a run flat feature that allows the
vehicle to be driven about 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph
(88 km/h), immediate service should be obtained.

NOTE: The run flat feature eliminates the need for a


spare tire or jack. This vehicle is not equipped with either
a spare tire or jack.
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

Safety

WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can


cause accidents.
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
Over inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)

Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
Always drive with each tire properly inflated.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish


response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
drivers side B Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem capif equipped. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per


12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the
outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Dont drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!
WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires


on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this


point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure

Distance driven

WARNING!
1 Worn Tire
2 New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread


grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.

All tires should be replaced after six years, regardless


of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning
can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have an accident resulting in serious
injury.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little


exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

WARNING! (Continued)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

CAUTION!

Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size


may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the


tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having


adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS


Do not rotate the tires as the wider rear tires will not fit
on the front of the vehicle.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the


following components:
Receiver Module
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,


which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
one or more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left
Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for 3 seconds, and a
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) flashing. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four


active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicles recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The


vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPM System Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds. This text message is then
followed by a graphic display, with - - in place of the
pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

5
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios:

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to


facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.1L Engine
The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties

necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,


and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.


Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85
ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol,
it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicles warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85


fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
poor engine performance
poor cold start and cold drivability
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
change the engine oil and oil filter
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged


exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added to Fuel


All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles
performance:
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emissions control system.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.
If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact
your authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
drivers side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.

Fuel Filler Cap

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control


system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
after-market cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction
Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top
off the fuel tank after filling.

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near


the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the


fuel tank is full.

NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

WARNING!

CAUTION!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a


portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.

Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message


If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to Onboard Diagnostic
System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.

WARNING!
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.

WARNING!
Do not tow when the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light is illuminated. Failure to follow
this could result in loss of control and serious
injury.
Tailpipes may be hot and you could be seriously
injured if you come into contact with the tailpipes.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions


The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and
ready for operation condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)


The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the
presence of a driver).

Tongue Weight (TW)


The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)


The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.

Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
theyre commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicles front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

Trailer Hitch Classification


Class
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on


your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)


The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
6.1L Automatic

GCWR (Gross Combined


Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Wt. Rating)
Trailer Wt.)
8,800 lbs (3 992 kg)
35 sq ft (3.25 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Max. Trailer Tongue


Wt. (See Note)
350 lbs (159 kg)

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as


part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire
Safety Information section in this manual.
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the


weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the


trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK.
Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.

Total weight must be distributed between the tow


vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

Towing Requirements Tires

Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes

Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe


and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
TiresGeneral Information for proper tire inflation
procedures.

Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or


vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.

Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation


pressures before trailer usage.

An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is


required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.

Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage


before towing a trailer. Refer to TiresGeneral Information for proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to TiresGeneral Information for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.

Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over


1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)


loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Towing any trailer will increase your stopping


distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.

WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the Autostick feature (D-) to select a lower gear range.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

performance and extend transmission life by reducing


excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.

Towing Tips Cooling System


To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be


changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the
proper maintenance intervals.

City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control (If


Equipped)
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.

Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is not allowed.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS


The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flashers. When the Hazard
Warning flasher switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on
and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Press the switch a second
time to turn off flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher


may run down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways Slow down.
In city traffic While stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341

the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.

JUMP STARTING
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the
battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure
carefully.

WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
(Continued)

342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12-Volt system, i.e.
Do not use a 24-Volt power source.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets, which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the transmission in PARK, and turn
the ignition OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive


terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.

WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection, and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343

7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above


sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent.
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion.
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE


CONTENTS
Engine Compartment 6.1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II . . . . . . 348

Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Emissions Inspection And Maintenance


Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351


Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357


Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366


Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

High Intensity Discharge Headlights


(HID) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup


Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution


Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power
Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . 386


Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 388


Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347

ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6.1L

1
2
3
4
5
6

Engine Coolant Reservoir


Power Distribution Center
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir

7 Engine Oil Dipstick


8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9 Engine Oil Fill
10 Coolant Pressure Cap
11 Air Cleaner Filter

348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II


Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and drivability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A CHECK GASCAP message
will be displayed in the EVIC (Refer to Section 4 of this

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349

manual). Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is


heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
The message will remain displayed until the vehicle
diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test will
perform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle
was keyed off above 40F (4C) outside temperature and
the following vehicle start is above 40F (4C) outside
temperature. It may be possible to have a message that
will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low
outside temperatures. If the test is performed and the
problem is gone, the message will disappear.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. See
your authorized dealer for service.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE


PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicles emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,


which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicles OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your


vehicles OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicles OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control


systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturers
warranty.

WARNING!

DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.

You can be badly injured working on or around a


motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.

352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed


maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about
5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain

the oil level in the SAFE range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range
will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range
on these engines.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed
the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.

based on the following recommendation and be within


the operating temperature shown in the engine oil viscosity chart.

Engine Oil Selection


For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF, and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-10725.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
engine oil, such as Mobil 1 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent.
Engine Oil Viscosity
SAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use within the
operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity
chart. SAE 5W-40 engine oil is also allowed. The proper
SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected

7
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to Engine Compartment in this section.

354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Synthetic Engine Oils


You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter


The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355

WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.

Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a fast charger is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a fast
charger to provide starting voltage.

356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Conditioner Maintenance


For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
further warranty information.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357

Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades


Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and

358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

the Washer Fluid Low message will be displayed. Refer


to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of
this manual.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised


for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.

CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturers specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:


Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361

Cooling System

WARNING!
When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,


flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System Drain, Flush and Refill


If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this
section for the correct fluid type.

CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze)
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR
Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)

Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant


(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34F
(37C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.

364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System Pressure Cap


The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is


satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.


Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is


equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install only
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result
in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367

pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when


pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed


container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.

Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this


section for the correct fluid type.

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate


the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.

Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial


boiling point, or is unidentified as to specifications may result in sudden brake failure during
hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching on fire.

Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.

368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the
transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has
the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable


you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369

Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.

CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.

370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,


touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care


All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels
protective finish.
YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If
Equipped
YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371

For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild


soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

Leather Seat Care & Cleaning


MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.

For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose


Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular


cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.

Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials products.


Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean, then
MOPAR Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses


The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the


buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Interior Fuses
The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to
the left of the steering column.

Fuse Panel

374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Audio Amp (B+)

Cavity
10

Sunroof (B+)
Htd Mirror (EBL)
Rr Pwr Out (B+)
Rr HVAC (R/O)
(Commander Only)
Door Locks (B+)

Pwr Outlet (B+)

11
12

13

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
10 Amp
Final Drive Control
Red
Module (FDCM),
Heater Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
(HVAC), Rear Heated
Seat Switch, O/H,
Heater Ventilation/
Air Conditioning
(HVAC) Relay, Rear
Park Assist
Spare (B+)
10 Amp
Door Mods, O/H
Red
Lamps, IP Courtesy
Lamps, Glove Box
Lamp (B+)
10 Amp
Autowipe (R/A)
Red

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375

Cavity
14
15
16

17
19
20

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

15 Amp
Blue
Spare
(R/S)
10 Amp
Red

Description
Cigar Ltr (R/A)
Tire Pressure Transponders (R/O)
Upper & Lower
Switch Bank, Diag.
Connector, Cluster
(B+)
Flipper Glass (B+)

Cavity
21

22
24

25

Steering Column Control Module (SCCM),


Cluster (R/S), BUX
Trailer Tow

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
Spare
(Acc Delay)
15 Amp
Rear Wiper (B+)
Blue
10 Amp
Power Distribution
Red
Center (PDC) Relays,
Powertrain Control
Module, A580 (R/S)
10 Amp
Shifter Assy (BTSI),
Red
Trans. Case Switch,
ESP/ABS, Trailer
Sway Damp Relay

376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)

Power Distribution Center

Cav- Cartridge
ity
Fuse
1
50 Amp
Red

MiniFuse

Description
PTC Heater 1 (Diesel
Only)

Cav- Cartridge
ity
Fuse
2
40 Amp
Green
3
50 Amp
Red
4
30 Amp
Pink
5
50 Amp
Red
6
30 Amp
Pink
7
40 Amp
Green
8
40 Amp
Green
9
20 Amp
Blue

MiniFuse

Description
HID Headlamps
PTC Heater 2 (Diesel
Only)
Power Outlets
PTC Heater 3 (Diesel
Only)
Cig Lighter, Trail Tow
Batt
Power Liftgate (Commander Only)
Starter, JB Power
Front Power Windows

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377

Cav- Cartridge
ity
Fuse
10

11
40 Amp
Green
12
30 Amp
Pink
13
40 Amp
Green
14
30 Amp
Pink
15

16
50 Amp
Red
17
30 Amp
Pink
18
40 Amp
Green

MiniFuse

Description
Spare
HVAC Blower
Rear Wiper, Ign R/O
Rear Window Defroster
(EBL)/Heated Mirror
Rear HVAC (If
Equipped)
Spare
ASD
ABS Pump
Accessory Delay, Seats

Cav- Cartridge
Miniity
Fuse
Fuse
19
40 Amp
Green
20
30 Amp
Pink
21
20 Amp
Yellow
22
20 Amp
Yellow
23
25 Amp
Natural
24
20 Amp
Yellow
25
20 Amp
Yellow
26
15 Amp
Blue

Description
JB Power
Wiper Motor
Fuel Pump
TCM, A/C Clutch
Power Inverter
Rear Heated Seats
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
Brake Lamps

378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cav- Cartridge
Miniity
Fuse
Fuse
27
20 Amp
Yellow
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow

15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow

20 Amp
Yellow

Description
HD Washer (If
Equipped) (Export
Only)
ABS Valves
PCM Batt (Gasoline
Only)
Spare
Spare
Powertrain Control
Module (Diesel Only)
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM) E-Diff
Spare
Trail-Tow Mod (Export
Only)

Cav- Cartridge
Miniity
Fuse
Fuse
36

37
20 Amp
Yellow
38
20 Amp
Yellow
39
20 Amp
Yellow
40
25 Amp
Natural
41
20 Amp
Yellow
42

43
25 Amp
Natural
44

Description
Spare
Ignition Switch
HID Left
HID Right
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Injectors
Subwoofer (SRT Only)
Spare
Coils, Actuators
Spare

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379

Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)

Cavity
9
10
12
13
14

Integrated Power Module

Cavity
8

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Description
Fuse
10 Amp
Lt Park Lamps
Red

15
16
17

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Trailer-Tow Park
Lamps
Rt Park Lamps
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #4
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #2
Adjustable Pedal
Ft Fog Lamps
Horn
Rear Fog Lamps (Export Only)

380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
18
19
20
21
22

23
27
28

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
50 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #1
Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #3
Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
MOD
Radiator Fan
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2

Cavity
29
30

Cartridge
Mini-Fuse
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) R/S
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) R/O

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Module
labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the


possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2142
Visor Vanity Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlights (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Headlights (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
Headlight
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb onequarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the


bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

1 High Beam Bulb


2 Low Beam Bulb

3 Turn Signal Bulb

384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Turn Signal


1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb onequarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the


bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Light
1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.
2. Turn the front fog light bulb onequarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.

1 High Beam Bulb


2 Low Beam Bulb

3 Turn Signal Bulb

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lights
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.

386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the


housing.

1 Tail/Stop Light Bulb


2 Tail/Turn Signal Bulb

3 Back-Up Light Bulb

4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.


5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
light assembly.

Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)


1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.

2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL


housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387

FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (MOPAR Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.
21 Gallons

Metric
79 Liters

7 Quarts

6.6 Liters

14.8 Quarts

14 Liters

388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS


Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (6.1L Engine)

Oil Filter (6.1L Engine)


Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection (6.1L Engine)

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part


MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology)
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, and
meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1
SAE 0W-40 or equivalent.
MOPAR Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent.
PLZTR5A13 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part


MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR NV146 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent. Usage of other fluid/
lubricants is NOT recommended.
MOPAR Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent.
MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid (P/N 05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets Chrysler Material
Standard MS-10838.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 392
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 394

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE


The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspection and service should also be done anytime a


malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles
oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393 M

Change your engine oil more often if you drive your


vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

Check the windshield washer solvent and add if I


N
required.
T

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals


exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.

Once a Month

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator


message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle
Information Center in Section 4 of this manual.

Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals


S
as required.

At Each Stop for Fuel


Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

E
N
A
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or N
C
damage.
E
C
H
E
D
U
L
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct E
S
operation.

Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake


master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.

At Each Oil Change


Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

M 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


A
I
N
CAUTION!
T
E
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
N
may result in damage to the vehicle.
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Required Maintenance Intervals


Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395 M

6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or


6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.

12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service


Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

M 396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
T 18 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or


24 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or


30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 397 M

36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or


36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or


42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or


48 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

M 398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


A
I
N 54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
T 54 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C
E

60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service


Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.


Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 399 M

66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or


66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or


72 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or


78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

M 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


A
I
N 84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
T 84 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C If using your vehicle for any of the
E
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;


replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.

90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or


90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or


96 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 M

102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or


102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or


108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or


114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Flush and replace the engine coolant.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

M 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


A
I
N 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
N Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
C Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
E Inspect the CV joints.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or


126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.

Inspect exhaust system.


Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 M

132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or


132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or


138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or


144 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.

Change the engine oil and engine oil


filter.
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

M 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


A
I
N 150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
T 150 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E Drain the transfer case and refill.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Adjust parking brake on vehicles


equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

Date
Dealer Code

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 M

This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer


to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE


CONTENTS
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or


Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 412

Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

If You Need Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 410

In The 50 United States And Washington,


D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 410


In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire


Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR


YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.


At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturers authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized


dealers service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturers customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturers customer center should include the following information:
Owners name and address
Owners telephone number (home and office)
Authorized dealership name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler LLC Customer Center


P.O. Box 218004
Auburn Hills, MI 483218004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 4652001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech


Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturers service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturers service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the


manufacturers Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturers service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturers service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturers service contract, and you
require service after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.

MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety


Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS


To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering


manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.

414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals


Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
Owners Manuals
These Owners Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:


18008904038 (U.S.)
18003871143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tires manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415

Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tires ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

10

418 INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,291


Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 363
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,70,180
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,181
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,387
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,294


Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 263
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,367
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 160
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

INDEX 419

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23


Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,294
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 69
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,382
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . .
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center High Mounted Stop Light
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. . 325
. . 289
. . 364
. . 369
69,324
. . 165
. . 164
. . 164
. . 164
. . 164
. . 168
. . 167
81,263
. . 386
. . 303

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

10

420 INDEX

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,71


Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59,64,66
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,223,226,236
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 246
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 364

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361


Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,365
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 362,387
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

INDEX 421

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,268


Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . 259
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 160
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297


Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 142
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 186
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,187
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 349,392
Engine
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

10

422 INDEX

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361


Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,324
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,387
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352,387
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,387
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 55
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,324,359

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358


Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,384,385
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

INDEX 423

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361


Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 388
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,186,384
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Front Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,387
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,327
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,327,348
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,24,109,320
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

10

424 INDEX

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329


Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,382
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,119
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 135
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 151

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128


Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,179
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,136
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 138

INDEX 425

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,276
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Lap/Shoulder Belts
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Lead Free Gasoline
Leaks, Fluid . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 63,64
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315


Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,128
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,180
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,300
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,135

10

426 INDEX

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)


Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,185,300
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 186
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,186,384
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,132
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,136
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 180
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,151
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 180
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,300
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,134,384,385
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

INDEX 427

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . 355
. . . . . 351
. . . . . 392
. . . . . 392
. . 180,349
. . . . . 413
. . . . . 123
. . . . . 123
. . . . . 123
. . . . . 321
. . . . . 192

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,412
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185

10

428 INDEX

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,387
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348,349
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Operator Manual (Owners Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,340
Owners Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 5,413

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368


Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 306
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

INDEX 429

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 160


Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,117
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,289
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 364
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,258
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Rear Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 261
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

10

430 INDEX

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Run Flat Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,258
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392


Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 42
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,66
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,372
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,371
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

INDEX 431

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,119
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,117
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,181
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,223,226,236

Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200


Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,179,384,385
Sirius Backseat TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,276
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,289

10

432 INDEX

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140


Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,380
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 46
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 263

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 183


Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 306
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,310,414
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,307
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 317

INDEX 433

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182


Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,301
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 337
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181


Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,367
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . 151
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

10

434 INDEX

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,179,384,385


UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
UConnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376,379
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 246
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,380
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353


Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,357
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,160
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,268
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

INDEX 435

Windshield Wiper Blades


Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement
Wipers, Intermittent . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

357
136
357
138
138

YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 370

10

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING


EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and


routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicles electronic systems.